1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26 /**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35 /**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 */
48
49 /**
50 * DOC: Warning
51 *
52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56 /**
57 * DOC: Frame format
58 *
59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 */
72
73 /**
74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
88 /**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 *
118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122 * .release_buffered_frames().
123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126 */
127
128 struct device;
129
130 /**
131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132 *
133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135 */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
142
143 /**
144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149 */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
155 };
156
157 /**
158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159 *
160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162 *
163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172 */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 u16 txop;
175 u16 cw_min;
176 u16 cw_max;
177 u8 aifs;
178 bool acm;
179 bool uapsd;
180 bool mu_edca;
181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190
191 /**
192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
206 };
207
208 /**
209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210 *
211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213 *
214 * @def: the channel definition
215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224 */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228
229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230
231 bool radar_enabled;
232
233 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235
236 /**
237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248 * for changes/removal.)
249 */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254
255 /**
256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257 *
258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261 * done.
262 *
263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266 */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272
273 /**
274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275 *
276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278 *
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280 * also implies a change in the AID.
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304 * changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309 * context had been assigned.
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313 * keep alive) changed.
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
322 * status changed.
323 *
324 */
325 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
326 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
327 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
330 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
331 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
336 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
337 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
338 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
339 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
340 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
341 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
342 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
343 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
344 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
345 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
346 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
347 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
348 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
349 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
350 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
351 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
352 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
353 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
354 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
356 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
357 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
358
359 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
360 };
361
362 /*
363 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
364 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
365 * filtering will be disabled.
366 */
367 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
368
369 /**
370 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
371 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
372 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
373 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
374 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
375 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
376 * once each time the timeout triggers.
377 */
378 enum ieee80211_event_type {
379 RSSI_EVENT,
380 MLME_EVENT,
381 BAR_RX_EVENT,
382 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
383 };
384
385 /**
386 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
387 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
388 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
389 */
390 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
391 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
392 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
393 };
394
395 /**
396 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
397 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
398 */
399 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
400 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
401 };
402
403 /**
404 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
405 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
406 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
407 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
408 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
409 */
410 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
411 AUTH_EVENT,
412 ASSOC_EVENT,
413 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
414 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
415 };
416
417 /**
418 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
419 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
420 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
421 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
422 */
423 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
424 MLME_SUCCESS,
425 MLME_DENIED,
426 MLME_TIMEOUT,
427 };
428
429 /**
430 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
431 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
432 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
433 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
434 */
435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
436 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
438 u16 reason;
439 };
440
441 /**
442 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
443 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
444 * @tid: the tid
445 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
446 */
447 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
448 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
449 u16 tid;
450 u16 ssn;
451 };
452
453 /**
454 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
455 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
456 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
457 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
458 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
459 * @u:union holding the fields above
460 */
461 struct ieee80211_event {
462 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
463 union {
464 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
465 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
466 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
467 } u;
468 };
469
470 /**
471 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
472 *
473 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
474 *
475 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
476 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
477 */
478 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
479 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
480 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
481 };
482
483 /**
484 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
485 *
486 * @lci: LCI subelement content
487 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
488 * @lci_len: LCI data length
489 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
490 */
491 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
492 const u8 *lci;
493 const u8 *civicloc;
494 size_t lci_len;
495 size_t civicloc_len;
496 };
497
498 /**
499 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
500 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
501 *
502 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
503 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504 */
505 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
506 u32 min_interval;
507 u32 max_interval;
508 };
509
510 /**
511 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
512 *
513 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
514 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
515 *
516 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
517 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
518 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
519 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
520 * ACK, BACK or both
521 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
522 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
523 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
524 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
525 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
526 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
527 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
528 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
529 * @assoc: association status
530 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
531 * or not
532 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
533 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
534 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
535 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
536 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
537 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
538 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
539 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
540 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
541 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
542 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
543 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
544 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
545 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
546 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
547 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
548 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
549 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
550 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
551 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
552 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
553 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
554 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
555 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
556 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
557 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
558 * the current band.
559 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
560 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
561 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
562 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
563 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
564 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
565 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
566 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
567 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
568 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
569 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
570 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
571 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
572 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
573 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
574 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
575 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
576 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
577 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
578 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
579 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
580 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
581 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
582 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
583 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
584 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
585 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
586 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
587 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
588 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
589 * your driver/device needs to do.
590 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
591 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
592 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
593 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
594 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
595 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
596 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
597 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
598 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
599 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
600 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
601 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
602 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
603 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
604 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
605 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
606 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
607 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
608 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
609 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
610 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
611 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
612 * station.
613 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
614 * responder functionality.
615 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
616 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
617 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
618 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
619 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
620 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
621 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
622 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
623 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
624 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
625 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
626 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
627 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
628 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
629 * interval.
630 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
631 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
632 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
633 */
634 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
635 const u8 *bssid;
636 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
637 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
638 bool uora_exists;
639 bool ack_enabled;
640 u8 uora_ocw_range;
641 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
642 bool he_support;
643 bool twt_requester;
644 bool twt_responder;
645 bool twt_protected;
646 /* association related data */
647 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
648 bool ibss_creator;
649 u16 aid;
650 /* erp related data */
651 bool use_cts_prot;
652 bool use_short_preamble;
653 bool use_short_slot;
654 bool enable_beacon;
655 u8 dtim_period;
656 u16 beacon_int;
657 u16 assoc_capability;
658 u64 sync_tsf;
659 u32 sync_device_ts;
660 u8 sync_dtim_count;
661 u32 basic_rates;
662 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
663 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
664 u16 ht_operation_mode;
665 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
666 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
667 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
668 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
669 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
670 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
671 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
672 int arp_addr_cnt;
673 bool qos;
674 bool idle;
675 bool ps;
676 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
677 size_t ssid_len;
678 bool hidden_ssid;
679 int txpower;
680 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
681 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
682 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
683 u16 max_idle_period;
684 bool protected_keep_alive;
685 bool ftm_responder;
686 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
687 /* Multiple BSSID data */
688 bool nontransmitted;
689 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
690 u8 bssid_index;
691 u8 bssid_indicator;
692 bool ema_ap;
693 u8 profile_periodicity;
694 struct {
695 u32 params;
696 u16 nss_set;
697 } he_oper;
698 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
699 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
700 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
701 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
702 bool s1g;
703 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
704 };
705
706 /**
707 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
708 *
709 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
710 *
711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
713 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
714 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
715 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
716 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
717 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
718 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
719 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
720 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
721 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
722 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
723 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
724 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
725 * station
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
731 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
732 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
733 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
734 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
735 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
736 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
737 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
738 * hardware queue.
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
740 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
741 * is for the whole aggregation.
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
743 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
745 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
746 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
748 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
749 * off-channel operation.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
751 * (header conversion)
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
753 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
755 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
756 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
757 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
758 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
760 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
761 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
762 * queue gets full.
763 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
764 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
765 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
767 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
768 * should kick the MLME state machine.
769 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
770 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
771 * status to user space)
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
773 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
774 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
776 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
777 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
778 * handled properly by the device.
779 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
780 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
781 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
783 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
784 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
785 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
786 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
787 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
788 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
789 * PS-Poll responses.
790 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
791 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
792 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
793 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
794 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
795 * monitor injection).
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
797 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
798 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
799 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
800 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
801 *
802 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
803 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
804 */
805 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
806 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
807 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
808 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
814 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
815 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
816 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
817 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
818 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
819 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
820 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
821 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
824 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
826 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
827 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
828 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
829 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
830 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
831 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
833 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
834 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
836 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
837 };
838
839 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
840
841 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
842
843 /**
844 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
845 *
846 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
847 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
849 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
850 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
852 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
853 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
854 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
855 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
856 * it can be sent out.
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
858 * has already been assigned to this frame.
859 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK: Don't use rate mask for this frame
860 * which is transmitted due to scanning or offchannel TX, not in normal
861 * operation on the interface.
862 *
863 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
864 */
865 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
866 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
868 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
869 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
871 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
872 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
873 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
874 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_USE_RATE_MASK = BIT(10),
875 };
876
877 /*
878 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
879 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
880 */
881 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
883 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
884 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
885 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
887 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
888 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
889
890 /**
891 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
892 * Rate Control algorithm.
893 *
894 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
895 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
896 *
897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
898 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
899 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
902 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
903 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
904 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
905 * Greenfield mode.
906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
908 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
909 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
910 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
911 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
912 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
913 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
914 */
915 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
916 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
918 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
919
920 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
923 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
924 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
925 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
926 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
927 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
928 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
929 };
930
931
932 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
933 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
934
935 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
936 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
937
938 /* maximum number of rate stages */
939 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
940
941 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
942 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
943
944 /**
945 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
946 *
947 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
948 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
949 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
950 *
951 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
952 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
953 *
954 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
955 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
956 *
957 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
958 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
959 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
960 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
961 * information::
962 *
963 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
964 *
965 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
966 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
967 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
968 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
969 * information should then contain::
970 *
971 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
972 *
973 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
974 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
975 */
976 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
977 s8 idx;
978 u16 count:5,
979 flags:11;
980 } __packed;
981
982 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
983
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)984 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
985 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
986 {
987 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
988 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
989 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
990 }
991
992 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)993 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
994 {
995 return rate->idx & 0xF;
996 }
997
998 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)999 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1000 {
1001 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1002 }
1003
1004 /**
1005 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1006 *
1007 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1008 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1009 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1010 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1011 *
1012 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1013 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1014 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1015 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1016 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1017 * @control: union part for control data
1018 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1019 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1020 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1021 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1022 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1023 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1024 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1025 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1026 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1027 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1028 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1029 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1030 * @pad: padding
1031 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1032 * @status: union part for status data
1033 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1034 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1035 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1036 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1037 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1038 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1039 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1040 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1041 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1042 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1043 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1044 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1045 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1046 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1047 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1048 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1049 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1050 */
1051 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1052 /* common information */
1053 u32 flags;
1054 u32 band:3,
1055 ack_frame_id:13,
1056 hw_queue:4,
1057 tx_time_est:10;
1058 /* 2 free bits */
1059
1060 union {
1061 struct {
1062 union {
1063 /* rate control */
1064 struct {
1065 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1066 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1067 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1068 u8 use_rts:1;
1069 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1070 u8 short_preamble:1;
1071 u8 skip_table:1;
1072 /* 2 bytes free */
1073 };
1074 /* only needed before rate control */
1075 unsigned long jiffies;
1076 };
1077 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1079 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1080 u32 flags;
1081 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1082 } control;
1083 struct {
1084 u64 cookie;
1085 } ack;
1086 struct {
1087 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1088 s32 ack_signal;
1089 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1090 u8 ampdu_len;
1091 u8 antenna;
1092 u16 tx_time;
1093 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1094 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1095 } status;
1096 struct {
1097 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1098 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1099 u8 pad[4];
1100
1101 void *rate_driver_data[
1102 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1103 };
1104 void *driver_data[
1105 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1106 };
1107 };
1108
1109 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1110 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1111 {
1112 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1113 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1114 */
1115 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1116 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1117 }
1118
1119 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1120 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1121 {
1122 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1123 }
1124
1125 /**
1126 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1127 *
1128 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1129 * @info: Basic tx status information
1130 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1131 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1132 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1133 */
1134 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1135 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1136 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1137 struct sk_buff *skb;
1138 struct rate_info *rate;
1139 struct list_head *free_list;
1140 };
1141
1142 /**
1143 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1144 *
1145 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1146 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1147 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1148 *
1149 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1150 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1151 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1152 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1153 */
1154 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1155 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1156 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1157 const u8 *common_ies;
1158 size_t common_ie_len;
1159 };
1160
1161
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1162 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1163 {
1164 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1165 }
1166
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1167 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1168 {
1169 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1170 }
1171
1172 /**
1173 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1174 *
1175 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1176 *
1177 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1178 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1179 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1180 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1181 *
1182 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1183 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1184 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1185 */
1186 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1187 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1188 {
1189 int i;
1190
1191 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1192 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1193 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1194 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1195 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1196 /* clear the rate counts */
1197 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1198 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1199
1200 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1201 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1202 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1203 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1204 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1205 }
1206
1207
1208 /**
1209 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1210 *
1211 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1212 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1213 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1214 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1215 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1216 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1217 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1218 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1219 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1220 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1221 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1222 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1223 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1224 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1225 * de-duplication by itself.
1226 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1227 * the frame.
1228 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1229 * the frame.
1230 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1231 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1232 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1233 * merging.
1234 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1235 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1236 * (including FCS) was received.
1237 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1238 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1239 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1240 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1241 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1242 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1243 * each A-MPDU
1244 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1245 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1246 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1247 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1248 * on this subframe
1249 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1250 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1251 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1252 * done by the hardware
1253 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1254 * processing it in any regular way.
1255 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1256 * them for sniffing purposes.
1257 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1258 * monitor interfaces.
1259 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1260 * them for sniffing purposes.
1261 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1262 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1263 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1264 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1265 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1266 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1267 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1268 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1269 * interleaved with other frames.
1270 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1271 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1272 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1273 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1274 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1275 * the first subframe.
1276 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1277 * be done in the hardware.
1278 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1279 * frame
1280 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1281 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1282 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1283 *
1284 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1285 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1286 * - DATA3_CODING
1287 * - DATA5_GI
1288 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1289 * - DATA6_NSTS
1290 * - DATA3_STBC
1291 *
1292 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1293 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1294 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1295 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1296 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1297 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1298 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1299 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1300 */
1301 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1302 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1303 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1304 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1305 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1306 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1307 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1308 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1309 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1310 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1311 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1312 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1313 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1314 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1315 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1316 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1317 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1318 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1319 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1320 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1321 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1322 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1323 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1324 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1325 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1326 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1327 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1328 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1329 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1330 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1331 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1332 };
1333
1334 /**
1335 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1336 *
1337 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1338 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1339 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1340 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1341 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1342 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1343 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1344 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1345 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1346 */
1347 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1348 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1349 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1350 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1351 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1352 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1353 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1354 };
1355
1356 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1357
1358 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1359 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1360 RX_ENC_HT,
1361 RX_ENC_VHT,
1362 RX_ENC_HE,
1363 };
1364
1365 /**
1366 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1367 *
1368 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1369 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1370 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1371 *
1372 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1373 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1374 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1375 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1376 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1377 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1378 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1379 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1380 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1381 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1382 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1383 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1384 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1385 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1386 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1387 * values were filled.
1388 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1389 * support dB or unspecified units)
1390 * @antenna: antenna used
1391 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1392 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1393 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1394 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1395 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1396 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1397 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1398 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1399 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1400 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1401 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1402 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1403 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1404 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1405 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1406 */
1407 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1408 u64 mactime;
1409 u64 boottime_ns;
1410 u32 device_timestamp;
1411 u32 ampdu_reference;
1412 u32 flag;
1413 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1414 u8 enc_flags;
1415 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1416 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1417 u8 rate_idx;
1418 u8 nss;
1419 u8 rx_flags;
1420 u8 band;
1421 u8 antenna;
1422 s8 signal;
1423 u8 chains;
1424 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1425 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1426 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1427 };
1428
1429 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1430 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1431 {
1432 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1433 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1434 }
1435
1436 /**
1437 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1438 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1439 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1440 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1441 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1442 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1443 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1444 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1445 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1446 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1447 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1448 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1449 * @data field.
1450 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1451 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1452 * length
1453 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1454 *
1455 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1456 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1457 * data.
1458 */
1459 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1460 u32 present;
1461 u8 align;
1462 u8 oui[3];
1463 u8 subns;
1464 u8 pad;
1465 u16 len;
1466 u8 data[];
1467 } __packed;
1468
1469 /**
1470 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1471 *
1472 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1473 *
1474 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1475 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1476 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1477 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1478 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1479 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1480 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1481 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1482 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1483 * for more.
1484 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1485 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1486 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1487 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1488 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1489 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1490 * operating channel.
1491 */
1492 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1493 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1494 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1495 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1496 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1497 };
1498
1499
1500 /**
1501 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1502 *
1503 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1504 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1507 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1508 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1509 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1510 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1511 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1512 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1513 */
1514 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1515 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1516 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1517 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1518 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1519 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1520 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1521 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1522 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1523 };
1524
1525 /**
1526 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1527 *
1528 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1529 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1530 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1531 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1532 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1533 */
1534 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1535 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1536 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1537 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1538 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1539
1540 /* keep last */
1541 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1542 };
1543
1544 /**
1545 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1546 *
1547 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1548 *
1549 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1550 *
1551 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1552 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1553 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1554 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1555 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1556 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1557 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1558 *
1559 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1560 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1561 *
1562 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1563 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1564 *
1565 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1566 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1567 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1568 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1569 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1570 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1571 *
1572 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1573 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1574 * configured for an HT channel.
1575 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1576 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1577 */
1578 struct ieee80211_conf {
1579 u32 flags;
1580 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1581
1582 u16 listen_interval;
1583 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1584
1585 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1586
1587 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1588 bool radar_enabled;
1589 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1590 };
1591
1592 /**
1593 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1594 *
1595 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1596 * operation.
1597 *
1598 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1599 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1600 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1601 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1602 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1603 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1604 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1605 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1606 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1607 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1608 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1609 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1610 * channel, expressed in TU.
1611 */
1612 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1613 u64 timestamp;
1614 u32 device_timestamp;
1615 bool block_tx;
1616 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1617 u8 count;
1618 u32 delay;
1619 };
1620
1621 /**
1622 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1623 *
1624 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1625 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1626 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1627 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1628 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1629 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1630 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1631 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1632 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1633 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1634 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1635 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1636 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1637 */
1638 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1639 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1640 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1641 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1642 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1643 };
1644
1645
1646 /**
1647 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1648 *
1649 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1650 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1651 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1652 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1653 */
1654
1655 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1656 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1657 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1658 };
1659
1660 /**
1661 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1662 *
1663 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1664 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1665 *
1666 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1667 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1668 * or the BSS we're associated to
1669 * @addr: address of this interface
1670 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1671 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1672 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1673 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1674 * for read access.
1675 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1676 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1677 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1678 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1679 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1680 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1681 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1682 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1683 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1684 * restrictions.
1685 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1686 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1687 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1688 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1689 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1690 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1691 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1692 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1693 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1694 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1695 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1696 * interface.
1697 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1698 * for this interface.
1699 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1700 * sizeof(void \*).
1701 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1702 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1703 * protected by fq->lock.
1704 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1705 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1706 */
1707 struct ieee80211_vif {
1708 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1709 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1710 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1711 bool p2p;
1712 bool csa_active;
1713 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1714
1715 u8 cab_queue;
1716 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1717
1718 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1719
1720 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1721
1722 u32 driver_flags;
1723 u32 offload_flags;
1724
1725 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1726 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1727 #endif
1728
1729 bool probe_req_reg;
1730 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1731
1732 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1733
1734 /* must be last */
1735 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1736 };
1737
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1738 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1739 {
1740 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1741 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1742 #endif
1743 return false;
1744 }
1745
1746 /**
1747 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1748 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1749 *
1750 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1751 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1752 *
1753 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1754 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1755 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1756 */
1757 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1758
1759 /**
1760 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1761 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1762 *
1763 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1764 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1765 *
1766 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1767 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1768 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1769 */
1770 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1771
1772 /**
1773 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1774 *
1775 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1776 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1777 *
1778 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1779 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1780 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1781 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1782 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1783 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1784 * generation in software.
1785 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1786 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1787 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1788 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1789 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1790 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1791 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1792 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1793 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1794 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1795 * MIC.
1796 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1797 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1798 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1799 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1800 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1801 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1802 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1803 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1804 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1805 * only for management frames (MFP).
1806 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1807 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1808 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1810 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1811 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1812 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1813 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1814 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1815 * generation only
1816 */
1817 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1818 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1819 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1820 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1821 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1822 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1823 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1824 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1825 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1826 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1827 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1828 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1829 };
1830
1831 /**
1832 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1833 *
1834 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1835 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1836 *
1837 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1838 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1839 * encrypted in hardware.
1840 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1841 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1842 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1843 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1844 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1845 * @keylen: key material length
1846 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1847 * data block:
1848 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1849 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1850 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1851 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1852 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1853 */
1854 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1855 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1856 u32 cipher;
1857 u8 icv_len;
1858 u8 iv_len;
1859 u8 hw_key_idx;
1860 s8 keyidx;
1861 u16 flags;
1862 u8 keylen;
1863 u8 key[];
1864 };
1865
1866 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1867
1868 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1869 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1870
1871 /**
1872 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1873 *
1874 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1875 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1876 * reverse order than in packet)
1877 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1878 * reverse order than in packet)
1879 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1880 * reverse order than in packet)
1881 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1882 * reverse order than in packet)
1883 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1884 */
1885 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1886 union {
1887 struct {
1888 u32 iv32;
1889 u16 iv16;
1890 } tkip;
1891 struct {
1892 u8 pn[6];
1893 } ccmp;
1894 struct {
1895 u8 pn[6];
1896 } aes_cmac;
1897 struct {
1898 u8 pn[6];
1899 } aes_gmac;
1900 struct {
1901 u8 pn[6];
1902 } gcmp;
1903 struct {
1904 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1905 u8 seq_len;
1906 } hw;
1907 };
1908 };
1909
1910 /**
1911 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1912 *
1913 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1914 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1915 *
1916 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1917 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1918 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1919 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1920 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1921 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1922 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1923 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1924 * key_idx value calculation:
1925 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1926 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1927 */
1928 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1929 u32 cipher;
1930 u16 iftype;
1931 u8 hdr_len;
1932 u8 pn_len;
1933 u8 pn_off;
1934 u8 key_idx_off;
1935 u8 key_idx_mask;
1936 u8 key_idx_shift;
1937 u8 mic_len;
1938 };
1939
1940 /**
1941 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1942 *
1943 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1944 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1945 *
1946 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1947 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1948 */
1949 enum set_key_cmd {
1950 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1951 };
1952
1953 /**
1954 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1955 *
1956 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1957 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1958 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1959 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1960 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1961 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1962 */
1963 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1964 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1965 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1966 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1967 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1968 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1969 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1970 };
1971
1972 /**
1973 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1974 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1975 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1976 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1977 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1978 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1979 *
1980 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1981 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1982 */
1983 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1984 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1985 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1986 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1987 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1988 };
1989
1990 /**
1991 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1992 *
1993 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1994 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1995 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1996 */
1997 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1998 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1999 struct {
2000 s8 idx;
2001 u8 count;
2002 u8 count_cts;
2003 u8 count_rts;
2004 u16 flags;
2005 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2006 };
2007
2008 /**
2009 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2010 *
2011 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2012 *
2013 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2014 * to the STA.
2015 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2016 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2017 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2018 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2019 * per peer TPC.
2020 */
2021 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2022 s16 power;
2023 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2024 };
2025
2026 /**
2027 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2028 *
2029 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2030 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2031 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2032 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2033 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2034 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2035 *
2036 * @addr: MAC address
2037 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2038 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2039 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2040 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2041 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2042 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2043 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2044 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2045 * Can be modified by driver.
2046 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2047 * otherwise always false)
2048 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2049 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2050 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2051 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2052 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2053 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2054 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2055 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2056 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2057 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2058 * the station moves to associated state.
2059 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2060 * @rates: rate control selection table
2061 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2062 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2063 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2064 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2065 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2066 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2067 * unlimited.
2068 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2069 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2070 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2071 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2072 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2073 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2074 */
2075 struct ieee80211_sta {
2076 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2077 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2078 u16 aid;
2079 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2080 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2081 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2082 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2083 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2084 bool wme;
2085 u8 uapsd_queues;
2086 u8 max_sp;
2087 u8 rx_nss;
2088 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2089 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2090 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2091 bool tdls;
2092 bool tdls_initiator;
2093 bool mfp;
2094 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2095
2096 /**
2097 * @max_amsdu_len:
2098 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2099 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2100 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2101 *
2102 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2103 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2104 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2105 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2106 *
2107 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2108 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2109 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2110 */
2111 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2112 bool support_p2p_ps;
2113 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2114 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2115 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2116
2117 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2118
2119 /* must be last */
2120 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2121 };
2122
2123 /**
2124 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2125 *
2126 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2127 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2128 *
2129 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2130 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2131 */
2132 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2133 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2134 };
2135
2136 /**
2137 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2138 *
2139 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2140 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2141 */
2142 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2143 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2144 };
2145
2146 /**
2147 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2148 *
2149 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2150 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2151 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2152 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2153 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2154 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2155 *
2156 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2157 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2158 */
2159 struct ieee80211_txq {
2160 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2161 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2162 u8 tid;
2163 u8 ac;
2164
2165 /* must be last */
2166 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2167 };
2168
2169 /**
2170 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2171 *
2172 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2173 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2174 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2175 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2176 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2177 *
2178 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2179 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2180 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2181 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2182 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2183 * algorithm.
2184 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2185 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2186 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2187 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2188 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2189 * CCK frames.
2190 *
2191 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2192 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2193 * the FCS at the end.
2194 *
2195 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2196 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2197 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2198 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2199 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2200 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2201 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2202 *
2203 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2204 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2205 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2206 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2207 *
2208 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2209 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2210 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2211 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2212 *
2213 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2214 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2215 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2216 *
2217 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2218 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2219 *
2220 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2221 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2222 *
2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2224 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2225 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2226 *
2227 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2228 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2229 *
2230 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2231 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2232 *
2233 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2234 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2235 * the stack.
2236 *
2237 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2238 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2239 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2240 *
2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2242 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2243 * dtim_period).
2244 *
2245 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2246 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2247 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2248 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2249 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2250 * only in that case.
2251 *
2252 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2253 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2254 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2255 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2256 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2257 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2258 *
2259 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2260 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2261 * software.
2262 *
2263 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2264 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2265 * active interfaces.
2266 *
2267 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2268 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2269 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2270 *
2271 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2272 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2273 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2274 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2275 * supported cipher suites.
2276 *
2277 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2278 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2279 * for frames.
2280 *
2281 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2282 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2283 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2284 * control for more details.
2285 *
2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2287 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2290 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2291 * is supported.
2292 *
2293 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2294 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2295 *
2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2297 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2298 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2299 *
2300 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2301 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2302 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2303 * CSA frame.
2304 *
2305 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2306 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2307 *
2308 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2309 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2310 *
2311 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2312 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2313 *
2314 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2315 * within A-MPDU.
2316 *
2317 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2318 * for sent beacons.
2319 *
2320 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2321 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2322 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2323 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2324 *
2325 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2326 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2327 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2328 * timeout.
2329 *
2330 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2331 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2332 *
2333 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2334 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2335 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2336 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2337 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2338 *
2339 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2340 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2341 *
2342 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2343 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2344 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2345 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2346 *
2347 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2348 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2349 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2350 *
2351 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2352 * TDLS links.
2353 *
2354 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2355 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2356 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2357 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2358 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2359 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2360 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2361 *
2362 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2363 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2364 *
2365 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2366 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2367 *
2368 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2369 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2370 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2371 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2372 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2373 *
2374 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2375 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2376 * TXQs to start with.
2377 *
2378 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2379 * length in tx status information
2380 *
2381 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2382 *
2383 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2384 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2385 *
2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2387 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2388 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2389 *
2390 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2391 * offload
2392 *
2393 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2394 */
2395 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2396 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2397 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2398 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2399 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2400 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2401 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2402 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2403 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2404 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2405 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2406 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2407 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2408 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2409 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2410 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2411 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2412 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2413 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2414 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2415 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2416 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2417 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2418 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2419 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2420 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2421 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2422 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2423 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2424 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2425 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2426 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2427 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2428 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2429 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2430 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2431 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2432 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2433 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2434 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2435 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2436 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2437 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2438 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2439 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2440 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2441 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2442 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2443 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2444 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2445 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2446
2447 /* keep last, obviously */
2448 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2449 };
2450
2451 /**
2452 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2453 *
2454 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2455 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2456 *
2457 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2458 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2459 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2460 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2461 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2462 *
2463 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2464 *
2465 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2466 * along with this structure.
2467 *
2468 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2469 *
2470 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2471 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2472 *
2473 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2474 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2475 *
2476 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2477 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2478 *
2479 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2480 * that HW supports
2481 *
2482 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2483 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2484 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2485 *
2486 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2487 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2488 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2489 *
2490 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2491 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2492 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2493 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2494 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2495 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2496 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2497 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2498 *
2499 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2500 * can handle.
2501 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2502 * the hw can report back.
2503 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2504 *
2505 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2506 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2507 * aggregation.
2508 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2509 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2510 * it shouldn't be set.
2511 *
2512 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2513 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2514 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2515 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2516 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2517 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2518 *
2519 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2520 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2521 *
2522 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2523 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2524 *
2525 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2526 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2527 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2528 * adding _BW is supported today.
2529 *
2530 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2531 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2532 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2533 *
2534 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2535 *
2536 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2537 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2538 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2539 * device_timestamp.
2540 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2541 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2542 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2543 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2544 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2545 *
2546 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2547 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2548 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2549 *
2550 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2551 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2552 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2553 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2554 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2555 * neither enabled.
2556 *
2557 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2558 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2559 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2560 *
2561 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2562 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2563 * supported by HW.
2564 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2565 * device.
2566 *
2567 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2568 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2569 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2570 *
2571 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2572 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2573 *
2574 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2575 */
2576 struct ieee80211_hw {
2577 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2578 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2579 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2580 void *priv;
2581 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2582 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2583 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2584 int vif_data_size;
2585 int sta_data_size;
2586 int chanctx_data_size;
2587 int txq_data_size;
2588 u16 queues;
2589 u16 max_listen_interval;
2590 s8 max_signal;
2591 u8 max_rates;
2592 u8 max_report_rates;
2593 u8 max_rate_tries;
2594 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2595 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2596 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2597 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2598 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2599 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2600 struct {
2601 int units_pos;
2602 s16 accuracy;
2603 } radiotap_timestamp;
2604 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2605 u8 uapsd_queues;
2606 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2607 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2608 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2609 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2610 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2611 u8 weight_multiplier;
2612 u32 max_mtu;
2613 };
2614
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2615 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2616 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2617 {
2618 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2619 }
2620 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2621
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2622 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2623 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2624 {
2625 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2626 }
2627 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2628
2629 /**
2630 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2631 *
2632 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2633 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2634 */
2635 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2636 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2637
2638 /* Keep last */
2639 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2640 };
2641
2642 /**
2643 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2644 *
2645 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2646 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2647 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2648 * @status: channel-switch response status
2649 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2650 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2651 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2652 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2653 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2654 */
2655 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2656 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2657 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2658 u8 action_code;
2659 u32 status;
2660 u32 timestamp;
2661 u16 switch_time;
2662 u16 switch_timeout;
2663 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2664 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2665 };
2666
2667 /**
2668 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2669 *
2670 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2671 *
2672 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2673 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2674 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2675 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2676 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2677 *
2678 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2679 */
2680 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2681
2682 /**
2683 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2684 *
2685 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2686 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2687 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2688 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2689 {
2690 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2691 }
2692
2693 /**
2694 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2695 *
2696 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2697 * @addr: the address to set
2698 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2699 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2700 {
2701 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2702 }
2703
2704 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2705 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2706 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2707 {
2708 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2709 return NULL;
2710 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2711 }
2712
2713 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2714 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2715 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2716 {
2717 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2718 return NULL;
2719 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2720 }
2721
2722 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2723 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2724 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2725 {
2726 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2727 return NULL;
2728 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2729 }
2730
2731 /**
2732 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2733 * @hw: the hardware
2734 * @skb: the skb
2735 *
2736 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2737 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2738 */
2739 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2740
2741 /**
2742 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2743 *
2744 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2745 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2746 *
2747 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2748 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2749 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2750 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2751 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2752 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2753 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2754 *
2755 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2756 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2757 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2758 *
2759 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2760 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2761 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2762 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2763 *
2764 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2765 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2766 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2767 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2768 *
2769 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2770 *
2771 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2772 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2773 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2774 * based on the receive flags.
2775 *
2776 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2777 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2778 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2779 * keys.
2780 *
2781 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2782 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2783 * handler.
2784 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2785 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2786 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2787 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2788 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2789 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2790 *
2791 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2792 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2793 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2794 *
2795 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2796 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2797 * requirements:
2798 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2799 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2800 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2801 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2802 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2803 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2804 encrypted with the new key and
2805 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2806 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2807 */
2808
2809 /**
2810 * DOC: Powersave support
2811 *
2812 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2813 *
2814 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2815 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2816 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2817 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2818 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2819 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2820 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2821 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2822 *
2823 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2824 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2825 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2826 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2827 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2828 *
2829 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2830 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2831 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2832 *
2833 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2834 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2835 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2836 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2837 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2838 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2839 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2840 *
2841 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2842 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2843 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2844 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2845 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2846 * periods.
2847 *
2848 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2849 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2850 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2851 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2852 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2853 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2854 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2855 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2856 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2857 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2858 *
2859 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2860 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2861 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2862 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2863 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2864 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2865 *
2866 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2867 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2868 */
2869
2870 /**
2871 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2872 *
2873 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2874 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2875 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2876 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2877 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2878 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2879 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2880 *
2881 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2882 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2883 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2884 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2885 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2886 *
2887 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2888 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2889 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2890 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2891 *
2892 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2893 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2894 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2895 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2896 *
2897 * - a list of information element IDs
2898 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2899 *
2900 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2901 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2902 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2903 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2904 * vendor information elements.
2905 *
2906 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2907 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2908 *
2909 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2910 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2911 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2912 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2913 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2914 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2915 *
2916 *
2917 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2918 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2919 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2920 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2921 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2922 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2923 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2924 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2925 *
2926 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2927 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2928 * signal strength threshold checking.
2929 */
2930
2931 /**
2932 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2933 *
2934 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2935 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2936 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2937 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2938 *
2939 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2940 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2941 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2942 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2943 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2944 * hardware flags.
2945 *
2946 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2947 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2948 * turned off otherwise.
2949 *
2950 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2951 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2952 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2953 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2954 */
2955
2956 /**
2957 * DOC: Frame filtering
2958 *
2959 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2960 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2961 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2962 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2963 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2964 *
2965 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2966 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2967 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2968 *
2969 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2970 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2971 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2972 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2973 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2974 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2975 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2976 *
2977 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2978 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2979 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2980 * or dropped.
2981 *
2982 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2983 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2984 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2985 * the flag, but not clear it.
2986 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2987 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2988 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2989 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2990 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2991 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2992 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2993 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2994 */
2995
2996 /**
2997 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2998 *
2999 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3000 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3001 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3002 *
3003 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3004 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3005 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3006 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3007 * the driver code.
3008 *
3009 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3010 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3011 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3012 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3013 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3014 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3015 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3016 *
3017 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3018 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3019 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3020 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3021 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3022 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3023 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3024 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3025 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3026 * @sta_notify callback.
3027 *
3028 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3029 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3030 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3031 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3032 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3033 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3034 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3035 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3036 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3037 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3038 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3039 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3040 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3041 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3042 *
3043 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3044 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3045 *
3046 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3047 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3048 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3049 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3050 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3051 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3052 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3053 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3054 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3055 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3056 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3057 *
3058 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3059 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3060 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3061 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3062 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3063 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3064 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3065 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3066 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3067 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3068 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3069 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3070 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3071 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3072 *
3073 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3074 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3075 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3076 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3077 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3078 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3079 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3080 *
3081 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3082 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3083 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3084 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3085 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3086 *
3087 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3088 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3089 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3090 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3091 */
3092
3093 /**
3094 * DOC: HW queue control
3095 *
3096 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3097 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3098 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3099 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3100 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3101 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3102 *
3103 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3104 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3105 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3106 *
3107 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3108 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3109 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3110 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3111 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3112 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3113 * the hardware queue.
3114 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3115 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3116 *
3117 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3118 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3119 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3120 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3121 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3122 *
3123 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3124 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3125 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3126 * off-channel queue: 9
3127 *
3128 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3129 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3130 *
3131 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3132 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3133 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3134 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3135 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3136 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3137 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3138 *
3139 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3140 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3141 *
3142 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3143 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3144 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3145 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3146 */
3147
3148 /**
3149 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3150 *
3151 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3152 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3153 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3154 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3155 *
3156 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3157 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3158 * multicast address.
3159 *
3160 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3161 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3162 *
3163 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3164 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3165 *
3166 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3167 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3168 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3169 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3170 * honour this flag if possible.
3171 *
3172 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3173 * station
3174 *
3175 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3176 *
3177 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3178 *
3179 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3180 *
3181 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3182 */
3183 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3184 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3185 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3186 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3187 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3188 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3189 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3190 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3191 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3192 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3193 };
3194
3195 /**
3196 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3197 *
3198 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3199 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3200 *
3201 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3202 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3203 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3204 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3205 *
3206 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3207 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3208 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3209 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3210 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3211 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3212 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3213 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3214 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3215 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3216 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3217 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3218 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3219 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3220 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3221 * session is gone and removes the station.
3222 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3223 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3224 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3225 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3226 */
3227 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3228 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3229 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3230 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3231 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3232 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3233 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3234 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3235 };
3236
3237 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3238 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3239
3240 /**
3241 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3242 *
3243 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3244 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3245 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3246 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3247 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3248 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3249 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3250 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3251 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3252 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3253 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3254 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3255 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3256 */
3257 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3258 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3259 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3260 u16 tid;
3261 u16 ssn;
3262 u16 buf_size;
3263 bool amsdu;
3264 u16 timeout;
3265 };
3266
3267 /**
3268 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3269 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3270 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3271 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3272 */
3273 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3274 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3275 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3276 };
3277
3278 /**
3279 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3280 *
3281 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3282 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3283 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3284 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3285 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3286 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3287 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3288 * the peer.
3289 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3290 * by the peer
3291 */
3292 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3293 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3294 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3295 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3296 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3297 };
3298
3299 /**
3300 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3301 *
3302 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3303 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3304 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3305 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3306 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3307 *
3308 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3309 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3310 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3311 */
3312 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3313 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3314 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3315 };
3316
3317 /**
3318 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3319 *
3320 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3321 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3322 *
3323 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3324 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3325 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3326 * of wowlan configuration)
3327 */
3328 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3329 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3330 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3331 };
3332
3333 /**
3334 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3335 *
3336 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3337 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3338 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3339 *
3340 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3341 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3342 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3343 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3344 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3345 * Must be atomic.
3346 *
3347 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3348 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3349 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3350 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3351 * or zero.
3352 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3353 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3354 * is added.
3355 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3356 *
3357 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3358 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3359 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3360 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3361 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3362 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3363 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3364 *
3365 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3366 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3367 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3368 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3369 * reconfigured at resume time.
3370 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3371 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3372 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3373 * must return 1 from this function.
3374 *
3375 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3376 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3377 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3378 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3379 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3380 *
3381 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3382 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3383 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3384 * in suspend().
3385 *
3386 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3387 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3388 * and @stop must be implemented.
3389 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3390 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3391 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3392 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3393 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3394 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3395 *
3396 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3397 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3398 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3399 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3400 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3401 *
3402 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3403 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3404 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3405 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3406 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3407 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3408 * MAC address of the device going away.
3409 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3410 *
3411 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3412 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3413 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3414 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3415 *
3416 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3417 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3418 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3419 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3420 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3421 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3422 * can sleep.
3423 *
3424 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3425 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3426 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3427 *
3428 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3429 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3430 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3431 *
3432 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3433 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3434 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3435 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3436 * which flags are changed.
3437 * This callback can sleep.
3438 *
3439 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3440 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3441 *
3442 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3443 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3444 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3445 * is enabled.
3446 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3447 * The callback can sleep.
3448 *
3449 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3450 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3451 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3452 * The callback must be atomic.
3453 *
3454 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3455 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3456 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3457 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3458 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3459 *
3460 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3461 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3462 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3463 *
3464 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3465 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3466 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3467 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3468 * that power save is disabled.
3469 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3470 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3471 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3472 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3473 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3474 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3475 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3476 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3477 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3478 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3479 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3480 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3481 * The callback can sleep.
3482 *
3483 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3484 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3485 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3486 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3487 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3488 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3489 * The callback can sleep.
3490 *
3491 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3492 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3493 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3494 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3495 *
3496 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3497 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3498 *
3499 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3500 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3501 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3502 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3503 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3504 *
3505 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3506 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3507 * this notification.
3508 * The callback can sleep.
3509 *
3510 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3511 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3512 * The callback can sleep.
3513 *
3514 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3515 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3516 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3517 * The callback must be atomic.
3518 *
3519 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3520 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3521 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3522 * should be set as well.
3523 * The callback can sleep.
3524 *
3525 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3526 * The callback can sleep.
3527 *
3528 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3529 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3530 *
3531 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3532 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3533 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3534 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3535 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3536 * This callback can sleep.
3537 *
3538 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3539 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3540 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3541 * callback can sleep.
3542 *
3543 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3544 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3545 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3546 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3547 *
3548 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3549 * power for the station.
3550 * This callback can sleep.
3551 *
3552 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3553 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3554 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3555 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3556 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3557 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3558 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3559 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3560 * The callback can sleep.
3561 *
3562 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3563 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3564 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3565 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3566 * in @sta_state.
3567 * The callback can sleep.
3568 *
3569 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3570 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3571 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3572 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3573 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3574 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3575 * Must be atomic.
3576 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3577 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3578 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3579 *
3580 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3581 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3582 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3583 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3584 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3585 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3586 * The callback can sleep.
3587 *
3588 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3589 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3590 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3591 * The callback can sleep.
3592 *
3593 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3594 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3595 * required function.
3596 * The callback can sleep.
3597 *
3598 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3599 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3600 * required function.
3601 * The callback can sleep.
3602 *
3603 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3604 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3605 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3606 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3607 * The callback can sleep.
3608 *
3609 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3610 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3611 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3612 * TSF synchronization.
3613 * The callback can sleep.
3614 *
3615 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3616 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3617 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3618 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3619 * The callback can sleep.
3620 *
3621 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3622 *
3623 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3624 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3625 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3626 * The callback can sleep.
3627 *
3628 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3629 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3630 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3631 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3632 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3633 *
3634 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3635 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3636 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3637 *
3638 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3639 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3640 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3641 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3642 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3643 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3644 * The callback can sleep.
3645 *
3646 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3647 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3648 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3649 * completion of the channel switch.
3650 *
3651 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3652 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3653 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3654 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3655 *
3656 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3657 *
3658 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3659 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3660 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3661 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3662 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3663 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3664 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3665 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3666 * must be accepted in this case.
3667 * This callback may sleep.
3668 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3669 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3670 *
3671 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3672 *
3673 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3674 *
3675 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3676 * queues before entering power save.
3677 *
3678 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3679 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3680 * The callback can sleep.
3681 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3682 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3683 * The callback must be atomic.
3684 *
3685 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3686 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3687 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3688 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3689 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3690 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3691 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3692 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3693 * more-data bit must always be set.
3694 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3695 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3696 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3697 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3698 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3699 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3700 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3701 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3702 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3703 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3704 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3705 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3706 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3707 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3708 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3709 * This callback must be atomic.
3710 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3711 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3712 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3713 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3714 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3715 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3716 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3717 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3718 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3719 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3720 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3721 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3722 * This callback must be atomic.
3723 *
3724 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3725 *
3726 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3727 *
3728 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3729 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3730 *
3731 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3732 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3733 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3734 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3735 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3736 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3737 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3738 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3739 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3740 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3741 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3742 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3743 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3744 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3745 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3746 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3747 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3748 *
3749 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3750 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3751 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3752 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3753 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3754 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3755 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3756 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3757 *
3758 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3759 * This callback may sleep.
3760 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3761 * This callback may sleep.
3762 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3763 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3764 * channel context with different settings
3765 * This callback may sleep.
3766 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3767 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3768 * This callback may sleep.
3769 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3770 * unbound from vif.
3771 * This callback may sleep.
3772 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3773 * another, as specified in the list of
3774 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3775 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3776 * This callback may sleep.
3777 *
3778 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3779 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3780 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3781 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3782 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3783 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3784 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3785 *
3786 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3787 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3788 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3789 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3790 * This callback may sleep.
3791 *
3792 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3793 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3794 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3795 *
3796 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3797 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3798 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3799 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3800 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3801 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3802 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3803 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3804 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3805 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3806 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3807 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3808 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3809 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3810 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3811 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3812 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3813 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3814 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3815 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3816 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3817 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3818 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3819 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3820 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3821 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3822 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3823 *
3824 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3825 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3826 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3827 *
3828 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3829 * and hardware limits.
3830 *
3831 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3832 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3833 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3834 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3835 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3836 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3837 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3838 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3839 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3840 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3841 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3842 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3843 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3844 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3845 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3846 * the function call.
3847 *
3848 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3849 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3850 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3851 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3852 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3853 *
3854 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3855 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3856 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3857 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3858 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3859 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3860 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3861 * changed parameters.
3862 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3863 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3864 * this call.
3865 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3866 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3867 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3868 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3869 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3870 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3871 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3872 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3873 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3874 *
3875 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3876 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3877 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3878 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3879 * This callback may sleep.
3880 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3881 * This callback may sleep.
3882 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3883 * 4-address mode
3884 */
3885 struct ieee80211_ops {
3886 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3887 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3888 struct sk_buff *skb);
3889 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3890 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3891 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3892 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3893 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3894 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3895 #endif
3896 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3897 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3898 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3899 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3901 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3902 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3903 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3904 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3905 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3906 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3907 u32 changed);
3908
3909 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3910 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3911
3912 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3913 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3914 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3915 unsigned int changed_flags,
3916 unsigned int *total_flags,
3917 u64 multicast);
3918 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3920 unsigned int filter_flags,
3921 unsigned int changed_flags);
3922 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3923 bool set);
3924 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3925 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3926 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3927 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3928 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3929 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3930 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3931 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3932 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3934 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3935 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3936 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3937 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3938 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3939 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3940 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3941 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3943 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3944 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3945 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3947 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3948 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3949 const u8 *mac_addr);
3950 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3951 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3952 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3954 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3956 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3957 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3958 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3959 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3960 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3961 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3962 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3963 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3964 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3966 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3967 struct dentry *dir);
3968 #endif
3969 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3971 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3973 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3974 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3975 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3976 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3977 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3978 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3981 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3984 u32 changed);
3985 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3986 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3987 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3988 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3990 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3991 struct station_info *sinfo);
3992 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3994 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3995 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3996 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997 u64 tsf);
3998 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3999 s64 offset);
4000 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4001 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4002
4003 /**
4004 * @ampdu_action:
4005 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4006 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4007 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4008 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4009 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4010 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4011 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4012 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4013 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4014 *
4015 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4016 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4017 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4018 *
4019 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4020 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4021 *
4022 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4023 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4024 * - ``TX: 81``
4025 *
4026 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4027 *
4028 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4029 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4030 * if the session can start immediately.
4031 *
4032 * The callback can sleep.
4033 */
4034 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4035 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4036 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4037 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4038 struct survey_info *survey);
4039 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4040 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4041 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4042 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4043 void *data, int len);
4044 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4045 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4046 void *data, int len);
4047 #endif
4048 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4049 u32 queues, bool drop);
4050 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4051 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4052 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4053 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4054 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4055
4056 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4059 int duration,
4060 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4061 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4062 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4063 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4064 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4065 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4066 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4067 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4068 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4069 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4070 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4071 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4072
4073 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4075 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4076 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4077 bool more_data);
4078 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4080 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4081 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4082 bool more_data);
4083
4084 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4085 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4086 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4087 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4089 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4090 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4091 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4092
4093 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4094 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4095 u16 duration);
4096
4097 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4098 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4099
4100 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4101 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4102 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4103 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4104 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4105 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4106 u32 changed);
4107 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4108 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4109 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4110 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4112 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4113 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4114 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4115 int n_vifs,
4116 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4117
4118 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4119 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4120
4121 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4122 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4123 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4124 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4125 #endif
4126 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4127 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4128 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4129 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4130 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4131 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4132
4133 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4135 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4136 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4137 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4139 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4140
4141 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4142 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4143 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4144 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4145 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4146 int *dbm);
4147
4148 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4149 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4150 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4151 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4152 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4153 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4155 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4156 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4157 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4158 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4159
4160 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4161 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4162 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4163
4164 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4165 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4166 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4167 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4169 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4170 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4171 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4172 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4173 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4174 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4175 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4176 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4177 u8 instance_id);
4178 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4179 struct sk_buff *head,
4180 struct sk_buff *skb);
4181 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4183 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4184 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4185 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4186 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4187 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4188 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4190 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4191 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4192 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4193 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4194 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4195 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4196 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4197 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4198 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4199 };
4200
4201 /**
4202 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4203 *
4204 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4205 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4206 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4207 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4208 * @priv_data_len.
4209 *
4210 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4211 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4212 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4213 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4214 *
4215 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4216 */
4217 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4218 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4219 const char *requested_name);
4220
4221 /**
4222 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4223 *
4224 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4225 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4226 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4227 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4228 * @priv_data_len.
4229 *
4230 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4231 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4232 *
4233 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4234 */
4235 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4236 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4237 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4238 {
4239 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4240 }
4241
4242 /**
4243 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4244 *
4245 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4246 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4247 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4248 *
4249 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4250 *
4251 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4252 */
4253 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4254
4255 /**
4256 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4257 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4258 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4259 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4260 */
4261 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4262 int throughput;
4263 int blink_time;
4264 };
4265
4266 /**
4267 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4268 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4269 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4270 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4271 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4272 */
4273 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4274 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4275 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4276 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4277 };
4278
4279 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4280 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4281 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4282 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4283 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4284 const char *
4285 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4286 unsigned int flags,
4287 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4288 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4289 #endif
4290 /**
4291 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4292 *
4293 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4294 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4295 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4296 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4297 *
4298 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4299 *
4300 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4301 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4302 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4303 {
4304 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4305 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4306 #else
4307 return NULL;
4308 #endif
4309 }
4310
4311 /**
4312 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4313 *
4314 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4315 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4316 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4317 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4318 *
4319 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4320 *
4321 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4322 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4323 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4324 {
4325 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4326 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4327 #else
4328 return NULL;
4329 #endif
4330 }
4331
4332 /**
4333 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4334 *
4335 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4336 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4337 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4338 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4339 *
4340 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4341 *
4342 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4343 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4344 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4345 {
4346 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4347 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4348 #else
4349 return NULL;
4350 #endif
4351 }
4352
4353 /**
4354 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4355 *
4356 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4357 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4358 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4359 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4360 *
4361 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4362 *
4363 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4364 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4365 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4366 {
4367 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4368 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4369 #else
4370 return NULL;
4371 #endif
4372 }
4373
4374 /**
4375 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4376 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4377 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4378 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4379 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4380 *
4381 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4382 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4383 *
4384 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4385 */
4386 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4387 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4388 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4389 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4390 {
4391 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4392 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4393 blink_table_len);
4394 #else
4395 return NULL;
4396 #endif
4397 }
4398
4399 /**
4400 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4401 *
4402 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4403 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4404 *
4405 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4406 */
4407 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4408
4409 /**
4410 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4411 *
4412 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4413 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4414 * before calling this function.
4415 *
4416 * @hw: the hardware to free
4417 */
4418 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4419
4420 /**
4421 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4422 *
4423 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4424 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4425 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4426 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4427 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4428 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4429 *
4430 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4431 */
4432 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4433
4434 /**
4435 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4436 *
4437 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4438 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4439 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4440 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4441 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4442 *
4443 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4444 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4445 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4446 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4447 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4448 *
4449 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4450 *
4451 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4452 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4453 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4454 * @list: the destination list
4455 */
4456 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4457 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4458
4459 /**
4460 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4461 *
4462 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4463 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4464 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4465 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4466 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4467 *
4468 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4469 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4470 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4471 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4472 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4473 *
4474 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4475 *
4476 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4477 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4478 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4479 * @napi: the NAPI context
4480 */
4481 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4482 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4483
4484 /**
4485 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4486 *
4487 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4488 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4489 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4490 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4491 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4492 *
4493 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4494 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4495 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4496 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4497 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4498 *
4499 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4500 *
4501 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4502 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4503 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4504 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4505 {
4506 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4507 }
4508
4509 /**
4510 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4511 *
4512 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4513 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4514 *
4515 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4516 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4517 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4518 *
4519 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4520 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4521 */
4522 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4523
4524 /**
4525 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4526 *
4527 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4528 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4529 *
4530 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4531 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4532 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4533 *
4534 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4535 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4536 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4537 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4538 struct sk_buff *skb)
4539 {
4540 local_bh_disable();
4541 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4542 local_bh_enable();
4543 }
4544
4545 /**
4546 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4547 *
4548 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4549 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4550 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4551 *
4552 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4553 *
4554 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4555 * each other.
4556 *
4557 * @sta: currently connected sta
4558 * @start: start or stop PS
4559 *
4560 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4561 */
4562 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4563
4564 /**
4565 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4566 * (in process context)
4567 *
4568 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4569 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4570 * applies.
4571 *
4572 * @sta: currently connected sta
4573 * @start: start or stop PS
4574 *
4575 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4576 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4577 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4578 bool start)
4579 {
4580 int ret;
4581
4582 local_bh_disable();
4583 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4584 local_bh_enable();
4585
4586 return ret;
4587 }
4588
4589 /**
4590 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4591 * @sta: currently connected station
4592 *
4593 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4594 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4595 * connected station was received.
4596 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4597 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4598 * be serialized.
4599 */
4600 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4601
4602 /**
4603 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4604 * @sta: currently connected station
4605 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4606 *
4607 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4608 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4609 * from a connected station was received.
4610 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4611 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4612 * serialized.
4613 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4614 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4615 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4616 * checks.
4617 */
4618 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4619
4620 /*
4621 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4622 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4623 */
4624 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4625
4626 /**
4627 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4628 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4629 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4630 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4631 *
4632 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4633 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4634 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4635 *
4636 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4637 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4638 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4639 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4640 *
4641 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4642 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4643 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4644 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4645 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4646 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4647 *
4648 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4649 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4650 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4651 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4652 * use this API.
4653 */
4654 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4655 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4656
4657 /**
4658 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4659 *
4660 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4661 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4662 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4663 *
4664 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4665 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4666 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4667 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4668 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4669 */
4670 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4671 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4672 struct sk_buff *skb,
4673 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4674 int max_rates);
4675
4676 /**
4677 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4678 *
4679 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4680 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4681 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4682 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4683 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4684 * slow stations to starve).
4685 *
4686 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4687 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4688 */
4689 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4690 u32 thr);
4691
4692 /**
4693 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4694 *
4695 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4696 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4697 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4698 *
4699 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4700 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4701 * @info: tx status information
4702 */
4703 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4704 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4705 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4706
4707 /**
4708 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4709 *
4710 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4711 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4712 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4713 *
4714 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4715 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4716 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4717 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4718 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4719 *
4720 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4721 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4722 */
4723 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4724 struct sk_buff *skb);
4725
4726 /**
4727 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4728 *
4729 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4730 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4731 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4732 *
4733 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4734 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4735 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4736 *
4737 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4738 * @status: tx status information
4739 */
4740 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4741 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4742
4743 /**
4744 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4745 *
4746 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4747 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4748 * specific skbs.
4749 *
4750 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4751 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4752 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4753 *
4754 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4755 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4756 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4757 * @info: tx status information
4758 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4759 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4760 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4761 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4762 {
4763 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4764 .sta = sta,
4765 .info = info,
4766 };
4767
4768 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4769 }
4770
4771 /**
4772 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4773 *
4774 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4775 *
4776 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4777 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4778 * for a single hardware.
4779 *
4780 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4781 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4782 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4783 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4784 struct sk_buff *skb)
4785 {
4786 local_bh_disable();
4787 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4788 local_bh_enable();
4789 }
4790
4791 /**
4792 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4793 *
4794 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4795 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4796 *
4797 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4798 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4799 *
4800 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4801 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4802 */
4803 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4804 struct sk_buff *skb);
4805
4806 /**
4807 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4808 *
4809 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4810 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4811 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4812 * 802.11 frames.
4813 *
4814 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4815 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4816 * calls in the same tx status family.
4817 *
4818 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4819 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4820 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4821 */
4822 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4823 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4824 struct sk_buff *skb);
4825
4826 /**
4827 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4828 *
4829 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4830 * connected STA.
4831 *
4832 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4833 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4834 */
4835 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4836
4837 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4838
4839 /**
4840 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4841 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4842 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4843 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4844 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
4845 * should be ignored.
4846 */
4847 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4848 u16 tim_offset;
4849 u16 tim_length;
4850
4851 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4852 };
4853
4854 /**
4855 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4856 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4857 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4858 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4859 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4860 *
4861 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4862 * obtain the beacon template.
4863 *
4864 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4865 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4866 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4867 * applicable, the CSA count.
4868 *
4869 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4870 *
4871 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4872 */
4873 struct sk_buff *
4874 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4876 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4877
4878 /**
4879 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4880 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4881 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4882 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4883 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4884 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4885 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4886 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4887 *
4888 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4889 * obtain the beacon frame.
4890 *
4891 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4892 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4893 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4894 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4895 *
4896 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4897 *
4898 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4899 */
4900 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4901 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4902 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4903
4904 /**
4905 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4906 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4907 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4908 *
4909 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4910 *
4911 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4912 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4913 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4914 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4915 {
4916 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4917 }
4918
4919 /**
4920 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4921 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4922 *
4923 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4924 * This function is called implicitly when
4925 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4926 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4927 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4928 *
4929 * Return: new countdown value
4930 */
4931 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4932
4933 /**
4934 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4935 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4936 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4937 *
4938 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4939 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4940 *
4941 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4942 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4943 */
4944 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4945
4946 /**
4947 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4948 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4949 *
4950 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4951 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4952 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4953 */
4954 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4955
4956 /**
4957 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4958 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4959 *
4960 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4961 */
4962 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4963
4964 /**
4965 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4966 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4967 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4968 *
4969 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4970 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4971 *
4972 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4973 *
4974 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4975 */
4976 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4977 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4978
4979 /**
4980 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4981 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4982 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4983 *
4984 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4985 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4986 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4987 *
4988 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4989 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4990 *
4991 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4992 */
4993 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4994 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4995
4996 /**
4997 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4998 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4999 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5000 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5001 * if at all possible
5002 *
5003 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5004 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5005 * BSSID and address is used.
5006 *
5007 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5008 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5009 *
5010 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5011 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5012 *
5013 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5014 */
5015 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5016 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5017 bool qos_ok);
5018
5019 /**
5020 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5021 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5022 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5023 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5024 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5025 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5026 *
5027 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5028 * hardware.
5029 *
5030 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5031 */
5032 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5033 const u8 *src_addr,
5034 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5035 size_t tailroom);
5036
5037 /**
5038 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5039 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5040 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5041 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5042 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5043 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5044 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5045 *
5046 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5047 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5048 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5049 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5050 */
5051 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5052 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5053 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5054 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5055
5056 /**
5057 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5058 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5059 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5060 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5061 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5062 *
5063 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5064 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5065 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5066 *
5067 * Return: The duration.
5068 */
5069 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5070 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5071 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5072
5073 /**
5074 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5075 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5076 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5077 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5078 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5079 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5080 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5081 *
5082 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5083 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5084 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5085 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5086 */
5087 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5088 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5089 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5090 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5091 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5092
5093 /**
5094 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5095 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5096 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5097 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5098 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5099 *
5100 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5101 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5102 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5103 *
5104 * Return: The duration.
5105 */
5106 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5107 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5108 size_t frame_len,
5109 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5110
5111 /**
5112 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5113 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5114 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5115 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5116 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5117 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5118 *
5119 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5120 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5121 *
5122 * Return: The duration.
5123 */
5124 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5126 enum nl80211_band band,
5127 size_t frame_len,
5128 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5129
5130 /**
5131 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5132 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5133 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5134 *
5135 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5136 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5137 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5138 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5139 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5140 *
5141 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5142 * frames are available.
5143 *
5144 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5145 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5146 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5147 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5148 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5149 * use common code for all beacons.
5150 */
5151 struct sk_buff *
5152 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5153
5154 /**
5155 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5156 *
5157 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5158 *
5159 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5160 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5161 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5162 */
5163 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5164 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5165
5166 /**
5167 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5168 *
5169 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5170 * from the given packet.
5171 *
5172 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5173 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5174 * with this P1K
5175 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5176 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5177 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5178 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5179 {
5180 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5181 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5182 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5183
5184 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5185 }
5186
5187 /**
5188 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5189 *
5190 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5191 * and transmitter address.
5192 *
5193 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5194 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5195 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5196 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5197 */
5198 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5199 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5200
5201 /**
5202 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5203 *
5204 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5205 * in the packet.
5206 *
5207 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5208 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5209 * encrypted with this key
5210 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5211 */
5212 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5213 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5214
5215 /**
5216 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5217 *
5218 * @pos: start of crypto header
5219 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5220 * @pn: PN to add
5221 *
5222 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5223 * the packet payload)
5224 *
5225 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5226 * point to the crypto header)
5227 */
5228 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5229
5230 /**
5231 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5232 *
5233 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5234 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5235 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5236 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5237 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5238 *
5239 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5240 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5241 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5242 *
5243 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5244 * can be done concurrently.
5245 */
5246 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5247 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5248
5249 /**
5250 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5251 *
5252 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5253 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5254 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5255 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5256 * @seq: new sequence data
5257 *
5258 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5259 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5260 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5261 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5262 *
5263 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5264 * can be done concurrently.
5265 */
5266 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5267 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5268
5269 /**
5270 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5271 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5272 *
5273 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5274 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5275 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5276 *
5277 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5278 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5279 */
5280 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5281
5282 /**
5283 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5284 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5285 * @keyconf: new key data
5286 *
5287 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5288 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5289 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5290 *
5291 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5292 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5293 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5294 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5295 *
5296 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5297 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5298 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5299 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5300 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5301 * of the reconfiguration.
5302 *
5303 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5304 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5305 *
5306 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5307 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5308 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5309 * the key that's being replaced.
5310 */
5311 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5312 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5313 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5314
5315 /**
5316 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5317 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5318 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5319 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5320 * @gfp: allocation flags
5321 */
5322 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5323 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5324
5325 /**
5326 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5327 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5328 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5329 *
5330 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5331 */
5332 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5333
5334 /**
5335 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5336 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5337 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5338 *
5339 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5340 */
5341 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5342
5343 /**
5344 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5345 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5346 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5347 *
5348 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5349 *
5350 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5351 */
5352
5353 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5354
5355 /**
5356 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5357 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5358 *
5359 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5360 */
5361 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5362
5363 /**
5364 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5365 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5366 *
5367 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5368 */
5369 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5370
5371 /**
5372 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5373 *
5374 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5375 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5376 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5377 * any context, including hardirq context.
5378 *
5379 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5380 * @info: information about the completed scan
5381 */
5382 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5383 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5384
5385 /**
5386 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5387 *
5388 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5389 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5390 *
5391 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5392 */
5393 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5394
5395 /**
5396 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5397 *
5398 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5399 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5400 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5401 * while associating, for instance.
5402 *
5403 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5404 */
5405 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5406
5407 /**
5408 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5409 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5410 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5411 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5412 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5413 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5414 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5415 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5416 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5417 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5418 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5419 * for instance.
5420 */
5421 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5422 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5423 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5424 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5425 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5426 };
5427
5428 /**
5429 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5430 *
5431 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5432 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5433 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5434 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5435 *
5436 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5437 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5438 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5439 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5440 */
5441 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5442 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5443 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5444 void *data);
5445
5446 /**
5447 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5448 *
5449 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5450 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5451 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5452 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5453 * be used.
5454 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5455 *
5456 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5457 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5458 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5459 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5460 */
5461 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5462 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5463 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5464 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5465 void *data)
5466 {
5467 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5468 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5469 iterator, data);
5470 }
5471
5472 /**
5473 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5474 *
5475 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5476 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5477 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5478 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5479 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5480 *
5481 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5482 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5483 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5484 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5485 */
5486 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5487 u32 iter_flags,
5488 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5489 u8 *mac,
5490 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5491 void *data);
5492
5493 /**
5494 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5495 *
5496 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5497 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5498 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5499 *
5500 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5501 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5502 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5503 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5504 */
5505 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5506 u32 iter_flags,
5507 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5508 u8 *mac,
5509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5510 void *data);
5511
5512 /**
5513 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5514 *
5515 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5516 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5517 * function for them.
5518 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5519 *
5520 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5521 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5522 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5523 */
5524 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5525 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5526 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5527 void *data);
5528 /**
5529 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5530 *
5531 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5532 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5533 *
5534 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5535 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5536 */
5537 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5538
5539 /**
5540 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5541 *
5542 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5543 * workqueue.
5544 *
5545 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5546 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5547 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5548 */
5549 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5550 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5551 unsigned long delay);
5552
5553 /**
5554 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5555 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5556 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5557 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5558 *
5559 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5560 *
5561 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5562 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5563 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5564 */
5565 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5566 u16 timeout);
5567
5568 /**
5569 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5570 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5571 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5572 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5573 *
5574 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5575 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5576 * from any context.
5577 */
5578 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5579 u16 tid);
5580
5581 /**
5582 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5583 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5584 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5585 *
5586 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5587 *
5588 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5589 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5590 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5591 */
5592 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5593
5594 /**
5595 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5596 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5597 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5598 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5599 *
5600 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5601 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5602 * can be called from any context.
5603 */
5604 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5605 u16 tid);
5606
5607 /**
5608 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5609 *
5610 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5611 * @addr: station's address
5612 *
5613 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5614 *
5615 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5616 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5617 */
5618 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5619 const u8 *addr);
5620
5621 /**
5622 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5623 *
5624 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5625 * @addr: remote station's address
5626 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5627 *
5628 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5629 *
5630 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5631 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5632 *
5633 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5634 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5635 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5636 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5637 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5638 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5639 * is not reliable.
5640 *
5641 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5642 */
5643 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5644 const u8 *addr,
5645 const u8 *localaddr);
5646
5647 /**
5648 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5649 * @hw: the hardware
5650 * @pubsta: the station
5651 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5652 *
5653 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5654 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5655 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5656 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5657 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5658 *
5659 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5660 * manner.
5661 *
5662 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5663 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5664 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5665 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5666 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5667 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5668 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5669 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5670 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5671 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5672 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5673 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5674 * woke up while blocked or not.
5675 */
5676 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5677 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5678
5679 /**
5680 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5681 * @pubsta: the station
5682 *
5683 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5684 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5685 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5686 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5687 *
5688 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5689 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5690 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5691 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5692 *
5693 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5694 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5695 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5696 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5697 */
5698 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5699
5700 /**
5701 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5702 * @pubsta: the station
5703 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5704 *
5705 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5706 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5707 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5708 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5709 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5710 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5711 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5712 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5713 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5714 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5715 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5716 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5717 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5718 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5719 */
5720 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5721
5722 /**
5723 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5724 *
5725 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5726 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5727 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5728 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5729 *
5730 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5731 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5732 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5733 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5734 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5735 * attempts.
5736 *
5737 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5738 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5739 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5740 * them to 0.
5741 *
5742 * @pubsta: the station
5743 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5744 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5745 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5746 */
5747 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5748 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5749
5750 /**
5751 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5752 *
5753 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5754 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5755 *
5756 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5757 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5758 */
5759 bool
5760 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5761
5762 /**
5763 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5764 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5765 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5766 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5767 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5768 *
5769 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5770 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5771 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5772 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5773 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5774 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5775 *
5776 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5777 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5778 * set_key callback.
5779 */
5780 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5781 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5782 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5783 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5784 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5785 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5786 void *data),
5787 void *iter_data);
5788
5789 /**
5790 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5791 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5792 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5793 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5794 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5795 *
5796 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5797 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5798 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5799 * in removal process will be skipped.
5800 *
5801 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5802 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5803 */
5804 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5806 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5807 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5808 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5809 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5810 void *data),
5811 void *iter_data);
5812
5813 /**
5814 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5815 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5816 * @iter: iterator function
5817 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5818 *
5819 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5820 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5821 * places while calling into the driver.
5822 *
5823 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5824 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5825 * removed.
5826 *
5827 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5828 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5829 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5830 * or not.
5831 */
5832 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5833 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5834 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5835 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5836 void *data),
5837 void *iter_data);
5838
5839 /**
5840 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5841 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5842 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5843 *
5844 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5845 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5846 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5847 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5848 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5849 * %NULL.
5850 *
5851 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5852 */
5853 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5855
5856 /**
5857 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5858 *
5859 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5860 *
5861 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5862 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5863 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5864 */
5865 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5866
5867 /**
5868 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5869 *
5870 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5871 *
5872 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5873 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5874 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5875 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5876 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5877 *
5878 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5879 * without connection recovery attempts.
5880 */
5881 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5882
5883 /**
5884 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5885 *
5886 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5887 *
5888 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5889 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5890 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5891 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5892 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5893 *
5894 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5895 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5896 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5897 * disconnect normally later.
5898 *
5899 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5900 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5901 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5902 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5903 */
5904 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5905
5906 /**
5907 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5908 * rssi threshold triggered
5909 *
5910 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5911 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5912 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5913 * @gfp: context flags
5914 *
5915 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5916 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5917 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5918 */
5919 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5920 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5921 s32 rssi_level,
5922 gfp_t gfp);
5923
5924 /**
5925 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5926 *
5927 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5928 * @gfp: context flags
5929 */
5930 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5931
5932 /**
5933 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5934 *
5935 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5936 */
5937 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5938
5939 /**
5940 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5941 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5942 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5943 *
5944 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5945 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5946 */
5947 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5948
5949 /**
5950 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5952 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5953 *
5954 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5955 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5956 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5957 */
5958 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5959 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5960
5961 /**
5962 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5963 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5964 */
5965 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5966
5967 /**
5968 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5969 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5970 */
5971 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5972
5973 /**
5974 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5975 *
5976 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5977 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5978 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5979 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5980 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5981 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5982 *
5983 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5984 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5985 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5986 */
5987 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5988 const u8 *addr);
5989
5990 /**
5991 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5992 * @pubsta: station struct
5993 * @tid: the session's TID
5994 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5995 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5996 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5997 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5998 *
5999 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6000 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6001 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6002 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6003 */
6004 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6005 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6006 u16 received_mpdus);
6007
6008 /**
6009 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6010 *
6011 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6012 * buffer.
6013 *
6014 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6015 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6016 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6017 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6018 */
6019 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6020
6021 /**
6022 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6023 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6024 * @addr: station mac address
6025 * @tid: the rx tid
6026 */
6027 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6028 unsigned int tid);
6029
6030 /**
6031 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6032 *
6033 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6034 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6035 * reordering.
6036 *
6037 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6038 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6039 *
6040 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6041 * @addr: station mac address
6042 * @tid: the rx tid
6043 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6044 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6045 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6046 {
6047 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6048 return;
6049 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6050 }
6051
6052 /**
6053 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6054 *
6055 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6056 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6057 * reordering.
6058 *
6059 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6060 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6061 *
6062 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6063 * @addr: station mac address
6064 * @tid: the rx tid
6065 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6066 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6067 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6068 {
6069 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6070 return;
6071 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6072 }
6073
6074 /**
6075 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6076 *
6077 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6078 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6079 *
6080 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6081 *
6082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6083 * @addr: station mac address
6084 * @tid: the rx tid
6085 */
6086 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6087 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6088
6089 /* Rate control API */
6090
6091 /**
6092 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6093 *
6094 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6095 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6096 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6097 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6098 * to be filled in
6099 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6100 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6101 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6102 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6103 * RTS threshold
6104 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6105 * if the selected rate supports it
6106 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6107 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6108 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6109 */
6110 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6111 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6112 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6113 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6114 struct sk_buff *skb;
6115 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6116 bool rts, short_preamble;
6117 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6118 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6119 bool bss;
6120 };
6121
6122 /**
6123 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6124 */
6125 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6126 /**
6127 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6128 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6129 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6130 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6131 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6132 */
6133 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6134 };
6135
6136 struct rate_control_ops {
6137 unsigned long capa;
6138 const char *name;
6139 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6140 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6141 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6142 void (*free)(void *priv);
6143
6144 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6145 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6146 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6147 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6148 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6149 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6150 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6151 u32 changed);
6152 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6153 void *priv_sta);
6154
6155 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6156 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6157 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6158 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6159 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6160 struct sk_buff *skb);
6161 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6162 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6163
6164 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6165 struct dentry *dir);
6166
6167 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6168 };
6169
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6170 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6171 enum nl80211_band band,
6172 int index)
6173 {
6174 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6175 }
6176
6177 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6178 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6180 {
6181 int i;
6182
6183 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6184 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6185 return i;
6186
6187 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6188 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6189
6190 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6191 return 0;
6192 }
6193
6194 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6195 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6196 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6197 {
6198 unsigned int i;
6199
6200 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6201 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6202 return true;
6203 return false;
6204 }
6205
6206 /**
6207 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6208 *
6209 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6210 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6211 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6212 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6213 *
6214 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6215 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6216 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6217 */
6218 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6219 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6220 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6221
6222 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6223 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6224
6225 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6226 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6227 {
6228 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6229 }
6230
6231 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6232 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6233 {
6234 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6235 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6236 }
6237
6238 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6239 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6240 {
6241 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6242 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6243 }
6244
6245 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6246 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6247 {
6248 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6249 }
6250
6251 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6252 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6253 {
6254 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6255 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6256 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6257 }
6258
6259 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6260 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6261 {
6262 if (p2p) {
6263 switch (type) {
6264 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6265 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6266 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6267 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6268 default:
6269 break;
6270 }
6271 }
6272 return type;
6273 }
6274
6275 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6276 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6277 {
6278 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6279 }
6280
6281 /**
6282 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6283 *
6284 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6285 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6286 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6287 *
6288 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6289 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6290 * matching GroupId management frame.
6291 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6292 */
6293 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6294 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6295
6296 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6297 int rssi_min_thold,
6298 int rssi_max_thold);
6299
6300 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6301
6302 /**
6303 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6304 *
6305 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6306 *
6307 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6308 *
6309 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6310 * applicable.
6311 */
6312 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6313
6314 /**
6315 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6316 * @vif: virtual interface
6317 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6318 * @gfp: allocation flags
6319 *
6320 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6321 */
6322 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6323 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6324 gfp_t gfp);
6325
6326 /**
6327 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6328 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6329 * @vif: virtual interface
6330 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6331 * @band: the band to transmit on
6332 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6333 *
6334 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6335 */
6336 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6337 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6338 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6339
6340 /**
6341 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6342 * of injected frames.
6343 *
6344 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6345 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6346 * of the skb before calling this function.
6347 *
6348 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6349 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6350 */
6351 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6352 struct net_device *dev);
6353
6354 /**
6355 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6356 *
6357 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6358 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6359 *
6360 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6361 *
6362 * private:
6363 *
6364 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6365 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6366 */
6367 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6368 u32 next_tsf;
6369 bool has_next_tsf;
6370
6371 u8 absent;
6372
6373 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6374 struct {
6375 u32 start;
6376 u32 duration;
6377 u32 interval;
6378 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6379 };
6380
6381 /**
6382 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6383 *
6384 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6385 * @data: NoA tracking data
6386 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6387 *
6388 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6389 */
6390 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6391 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6392
6393 /**
6394 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6395 *
6396 * @data: NoA tracking data
6397 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6398 */
6399 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6400
6401 /**
6402 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6403 * @vif: virtual interface
6404 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6405 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6406 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6407 * @gfp: allocation flags
6408 *
6409 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6410 */
6411 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6412 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6413 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6414
6415 /**
6416 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6417 *
6418 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6419 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6420 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6421 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6422 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6423 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6424 *
6425 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6426 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6427 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6428 *
6429 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6430 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6431 *
6432 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6433 */
6434 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6435
6436 /**
6437 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6438 *
6439 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6440 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6441 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6442 *
6443 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6444 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6445 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6446 *
6447 * @sta: the station
6448 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6449 */
6450 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6451
6452 /**
6453 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6454 *
6455 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6456 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6457 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6458 *
6459 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6460 *
6461 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6462 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6463 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6464 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6465 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6466 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6467 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6468 *
6469 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6470 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6471 */
6472 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6473 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6474
6475 /**
6476 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6477 * (in process context)
6478 *
6479 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6480 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6481 *
6482 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6483 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6484 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6485 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6486 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6487 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6488 {
6489 struct sk_buff *skb;
6490
6491 local_bh_disable();
6492 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6493 local_bh_enable();
6494
6495 return skb;
6496 }
6497
6498 /**
6499 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6500 *
6501 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6502 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6503 *
6504 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6505 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6506 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6507 */
6508 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6509
6510 /**
6511 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6512 *
6513 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6514 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6515 *
6516 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6517 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6518 */
6519 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6520
6521 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6522 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6523 {
6524 }
6525
6526 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6527 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6528
6529 /**
6530 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6531 *
6532 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6533 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6534 *
6535 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6536 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6537 *
6538 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6539 * this TXQ internally.
6540 */
6541 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6542 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6543 {
6544 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6545 }
6546
6547 /**
6548 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6549 *
6550 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6551 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6552 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6553 *
6554 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6555 * internally.
6556 */
6557 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)6558 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6559 bool force)
6560 {
6561 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6562 }
6563
6564 /**
6565 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6566 *
6567 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6568 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6569 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6570 * next_txq().
6571 *
6572 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6573 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6574 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6575 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6576 * again.
6577 *
6578 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6579 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6580 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6581 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6582 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6583 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6584 *
6585 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6586 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6587 */
6588 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6589 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6590
6591 /**
6592 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6593 *
6594 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6595 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6596 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6597 *
6598 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6599 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6600 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6601 */
6602 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6603 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6604 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6605
6606 /**
6607 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6608 *
6609 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6610 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6611 *
6612 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6613 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6614 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6615 * @gfp: allocation flags
6616 */
6617 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6618 u8 inst_id,
6619 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6620 gfp_t gfp);
6621
6622 /**
6623 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6624 *
6625 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6626 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6627 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6628 *
6629 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6630 * @match: match event information
6631 * @gfp: allocation flags
6632 */
6633 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6634 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6635 gfp_t gfp);
6636
6637 /**
6638 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6639 *
6640 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6641 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6642 *
6643 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6644 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6645 * information.
6646 * @len: frame length in bytes
6647 */
6648 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6649 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6650 int len);
6651
6652 /**
6653 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6654 *
6655 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6656 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6657 *
6658 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6659 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6660 * @len: frame length in bytes
6661 */
6662 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6663 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6664 int len);
6665 /**
6666 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6667 *
6668 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6669 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6670 * hardware or firmware.
6671 *
6672 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6673 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6674 */
6675 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6676
6677 /**
6678 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6679 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6680 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6681 *
6682 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6683 *
6684 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6685 */
6686 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6687 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6688
6689 /**
6690 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6691 * probe response template.
6692 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6693 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6694 *
6695 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6696 *
6697 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6698 */
6699 struct sk_buff *
6700 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6701 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6702 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6703